25
Chapter 1 Discovering Canada

Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 125

Chapter 1Discovering Canada

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 225

2 Chapter 1

Introduction to the Chapter

Canada is a vast country with almost endless possibilities for adventure Whether you are living in or

visiting Canada there is a great deal that you can explore in this country

Canada has a wide variety of geographical regions Each has unique characteristics and is worth getting toknow Travelling into Western Canada you will see the vastness of the Canadian Prairies and the majesty

of the Rocky Mountains Travelling into Eastern Canada you will see the beauty of the St Lawrence

Lowlands and the Appalachian Mountains If you travel north you will discover the wonders of the

Arctic with its unique vegetation and wildlife

e culture of Canada is also diverse While Canada has two official languages French and English it

is multicultural e Aboriginal Peoples of Canada who have many different cultures and languages

have inhabited this land from time immemorial Immigrants from around the world have settled in

Canada for hundreds of years and brought with them a diversity of traditions and values As a result of

this mix of Aboriginal Peoples and immigrants Canada is well known for its cultural diversity

In Chapter 1 you will learn about the geography of Canada You will complete a quiz focused on a few

popular places in Canada and then you will read about two of the many spectacular places to visit

Canada Focus on Some Facts

Test your knowledge of the geography of Canada by responding to the questions below e map may

help you with the answers

1 Name the capital city of Canada

2 Name the capital city of the province in which you live

3 State the number of provinces and territories in Canada

Provinces _________ Territories _________

4 Name the province to the east of where you live and the province to the west What are the capital

cities of these two provinces Province to the east ________________________ Capital city ________________________

Province to the west ________________________ Capital city ________________________

6 Name the province in Canada where French is spoken by the majority of the population

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325

Chapter 1

In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the

results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their

favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians

suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1

million votes were cast in the contest

Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo

as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or

friends or use the Internet

Ontario

Queacutebec

B r i t i s

h

C o l u

m b i a

A l b

e r t a

Yukon

NunavutNorthwest

Territories

S a s

k a t c h

e w a

n

Manitoba

N e w f o u n d l a n d a n

d L a b

r a d o

r

New Brunswick

Nova Scotia

PrinceEdwardIsland

O

Toronto

QueacutebecFredericton

Halifax

St Joh

Charlottetown

Iqaluit

Yellowknife

Whitehorse

Victoria

Edmonton

Regina

Winnipeg

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425

4 Chapter 1

Te Bay of Fundy

(67 670 votes)

Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)

Northern Lights(61 417 votes)

Te Rockies

(55 630 votes)

Cabot rail

(44 073 votes)

Niagara Falls

(81 818 votes)

Te Sleeping Giant

(177 305 votes)

Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location

Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada

on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525

Chapter 1

Using Adjectives to Describe

Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives

describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing

Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing

e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative

Adjectives Tat Are Neutral

Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning

Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning

greensofthardsmoothrough

excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular

terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting

Exercise 1

1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the

least positive to you

2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the

most negative to you

Exercise 2

Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th

sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i

neutral or expresses an opinion

1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city

2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations

throughout the year

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 2: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 225

2 Chapter 1

Introduction to the Chapter

Canada is a vast country with almost endless possibilities for adventure Whether you are living in or

visiting Canada there is a great deal that you can explore in this country

Canada has a wide variety of geographical regions Each has unique characteristics and is worth getting toknow Travelling into Western Canada you will see the vastness of the Canadian Prairies and the majesty

of the Rocky Mountains Travelling into Eastern Canada you will see the beauty of the St Lawrence

Lowlands and the Appalachian Mountains If you travel north you will discover the wonders of the

Arctic with its unique vegetation and wildlife

e culture of Canada is also diverse While Canada has two official languages French and English it

is multicultural e Aboriginal Peoples of Canada who have many different cultures and languages

have inhabited this land from time immemorial Immigrants from around the world have settled in

Canada for hundreds of years and brought with them a diversity of traditions and values As a result of

this mix of Aboriginal Peoples and immigrants Canada is well known for its cultural diversity

In Chapter 1 you will learn about the geography of Canada You will complete a quiz focused on a few

popular places in Canada and then you will read about two of the many spectacular places to visit

Canada Focus on Some Facts

Test your knowledge of the geography of Canada by responding to the questions below e map may

help you with the answers

1 Name the capital city of Canada

2 Name the capital city of the province in which you live

3 State the number of provinces and territories in Canada

Provinces _________ Territories _________

4 Name the province to the east of where you live and the province to the west What are the capital

cities of these two provinces Province to the east ________________________ Capital city ________________________

Province to the west ________________________ Capital city ________________________

6 Name the province in Canada where French is spoken by the majority of the population

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325

Chapter 1

In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the

results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their

favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians

suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1

million votes were cast in the contest

Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo

as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or

friends or use the Internet

Ontario

Queacutebec

B r i t i s

h

C o l u

m b i a

A l b

e r t a

Yukon

NunavutNorthwest

Territories

S a s

k a t c h

e w a

n

Manitoba

N e w f o u n d l a n d a n

d L a b

r a d o

r

New Brunswick

Nova Scotia

PrinceEdwardIsland

O

Toronto

QueacutebecFredericton

Halifax

St Joh

Charlottetown

Iqaluit

Yellowknife

Whitehorse

Victoria

Edmonton

Regina

Winnipeg

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425

4 Chapter 1

Te Bay of Fundy

(67 670 votes)

Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)

Northern Lights(61 417 votes)

Te Rockies

(55 630 votes)

Cabot rail

(44 073 votes)

Niagara Falls

(81 818 votes)

Te Sleeping Giant

(177 305 votes)

Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location

Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada

on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525

Chapter 1

Using Adjectives to Describe

Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives

describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing

Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing

e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative

Adjectives Tat Are Neutral

Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning

Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning

greensofthardsmoothrough

excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular

terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting

Exercise 1

1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the

least positive to you

2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the

most negative to you

Exercise 2

Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th

sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i

neutral or expresses an opinion

1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city

2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations

throughout the year

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 3: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325

Chapter 1

In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the

results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their

favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians

suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1

million votes were cast in the contest

Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo

as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or

friends or use the Internet

Ontario

Queacutebec

B r i t i s

h

C o l u

m b i a

A l b

e r t a

Yukon

NunavutNorthwest

Territories

S a s

k a t c h

e w a

n

Manitoba

N e w f o u n d l a n d a n

d L a b

r a d o

r

New Brunswick

Nova Scotia

PrinceEdwardIsland

O

Toronto

QueacutebecFredericton

Halifax

St Joh

Charlottetown

Iqaluit

Yellowknife

Whitehorse

Victoria

Edmonton

Regina

Winnipeg

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425

4 Chapter 1

Te Bay of Fundy

(67 670 votes)

Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)

Northern Lights(61 417 votes)

Te Rockies

(55 630 votes)

Cabot rail

(44 073 votes)

Niagara Falls

(81 818 votes)

Te Sleeping Giant

(177 305 votes)

Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location

Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada

on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525

Chapter 1

Using Adjectives to Describe

Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives

describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing

Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing

e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative

Adjectives Tat Are Neutral

Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning

Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning

greensofthardsmoothrough

excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular

terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting

Exercise 1

1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the

least positive to you

2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the

most negative to you

Exercise 2

Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th

sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i

neutral or expresses an opinion

1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city

2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations

throughout the year

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 4: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425

4 Chapter 1

Te Bay of Fundy

(67 670 votes)

Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)

Northern Lights(61 417 votes)

Te Rockies

(55 630 votes)

Cabot rail

(44 073 votes)

Niagara Falls

(81 818 votes)

Te Sleeping Giant

(177 305 votes)

Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location

Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada

on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525

Chapter 1

Using Adjectives to Describe

Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives

describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing

Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing

e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative

Adjectives Tat Are Neutral

Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning

Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning

greensofthardsmoothrough

excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular

terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting

Exercise 1

1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the

least positive to you

2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the

most negative to you

Exercise 2

Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th

sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i

neutral or expresses an opinion

1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city

2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations

throughout the year

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 5: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525

Chapter 1

Using Adjectives to Describe

Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives

describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing

Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing

e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative

Adjectives Tat Are Neutral

Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning

Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning

greensofthardsmoothrough

excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular

terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting

Exercise 1

1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the

least positive to you

2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering

the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the

most negative to you

Exercise 2

Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th

sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i

neutral or expresses an opinion

1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city

2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations

throughout the year

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 6: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625

6 Chapter 1

Exercise 3

As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en

decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion

Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called

collocation

Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example

we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e

adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo

Exercise

e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral

or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates

Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion

Expresses aNegative Opinion

large

enormous

quiet

magnificent

unique

beautiful

interesting

fun

small

sleepy

incredible

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 7: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725

Chapter 1

Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading

An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the

adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of

fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases

for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following

truly there can be no doubt that

honestly without a doubt

absolutely certainly

incredibly

Watch for these words and phrases in your reading

Exercise 1

Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements

express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion

1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____

2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and

incredible variety of wildlife ____

3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____

4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____

5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____

6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____

8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____

9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____

10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____

11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 8: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825

8 Chapter 1

Exercise 2

Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about

the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of

opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify

which statements are facts and which are opinions

1 _____________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

3 ______________________________________________________________________

4 ______________________________________________________________________

1 ______________________________________________________________________

2 ______________________________________________________________________

Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another

exercise later in the chapter

Reading

Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 What do you know about the province of Quebec

2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of

the carnival

3 In what type of winter activities have you participated

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 9: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925

Chapter 1

Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information

1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City

2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this

exercise

Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i

a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely

to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article

for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text

If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words

___________ e number of people who

attend the Carnaval de

Queacutebec annually

___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament

Buildings

___________ e size of the Ice Hotel

Quebec-Canada

___________ e number of guest rooms

and suites in the Ice Hotel

___________ e traditional activity

located at Place Loto-

Quebec

[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival

(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is

Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter

carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit

to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)

although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Quebec City Quebec

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 10: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025

10 Chapter 1

[2] Watching over the carnival is

Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1

Bonhomme is a large snowman

he is newly constructed each

year According to local stories

Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice

Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near

the Quebec government buildings

e carnival has many highlights

ese include the snow sculpture

competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy

slides for adults and children the

dogsledding competition through

the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and

the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to

their bathing suits in front of

a lively crowd and dive into a

snowdrift e annual canoe race

in which participants race across

the icy St Lawrence River is even

more daring

[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for

visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada

a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the

shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an

exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly

constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is

not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit

and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar

1 mascot a symbol of an event

2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 11: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125

Chapter 1

Vocabulary in Context

Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the

academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will

appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies

Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below

1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of

brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are

organized for families (paragraph 1)

a) customary

b) new

c) magnificent

2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)

a) is made b) is connected

c) is designed

3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)

a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in

b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at

c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at

4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of

snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular

b) very large

c) medium-sized

5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)

a) best parts

b) longest parts

c) strangest parts

6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides

for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively

crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)

a) weekly

b) monthly

c) yearly

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 12: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225

12 Chapter 1

7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel

constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)

a) suitable

b) fun

c) active

8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) surrounded by

b) situated on

c) south of

9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition

space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)

a) gymnasium

b) library

c) display

Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards

Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase

the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in

English

1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from

Reading 1 on one side of the card

2 On the other side of the card do the following

a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in

English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write

the translation of the word in another language)

b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have

difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a

good sample sentence

3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1

4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing

the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you

remember them

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 13: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec

Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec

Length

General activities

1

2

3

Number of people who attend

Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec

Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

1

2

3

Activities

1

2

3

4

5

Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada

Size

Materials used in construction

Location

Number of guest rooms

Other rooms in the hotel

1

2

3

4

Advice

Comprehension Check

1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 14: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425

14 Chapter 1

2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the

Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion

Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo

Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions

a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________

b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-

Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition

through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois

strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________

c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more

daring __________

d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos

no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot

hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________

e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more

than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year

from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________

3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before

You Die For whom do you think the book was written

4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not

Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands

Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic

1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places

to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of

the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada

2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know

about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article

compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 15: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525

Chapter 1

The Queen Charlotte Islands

British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada

[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte

Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means

Islands of the People) are the homeland of the

Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British

Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands

mostly on Graham Island and about half of

these people are Haida e islands are also home

to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life

Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off

the coast of British Columbia this group of 150

islands has developed its own species of flora1 and

fauna2

From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live

on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen

Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million

nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos

population of peregrine falcons and salmon

[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000

years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred

objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European

diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council

of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the

second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island

is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is

beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed

in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages

which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the

park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours

offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the

Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from

the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for

meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 16: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625

16 Chapter 1

1 flora plants that grow in a place

2 fauna animals that live in a place

3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them

Adapted from

Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing

Vocabulary in Context

In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described

flora all the plants that grow in a place

fauna all the animals that live in a place

1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or

fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you

make the best guesses that you can

Flora Fauna

black bears

cedar

deer mice

hemlock

peregrine falcons

salmon

seabirds

spruce

2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 17: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725

Chapter 1

Paragraph 1 Basic information about the

Queen Charlotte Islands

Indigenous name

Information about people on the Islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

1

2

3

Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people

on the islands

e Haida people before contact with

Europeans

e Haida people after contact with

Europeans

Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii

Haanas National Park Reserve

and Haida Heritage Site

Description of the park

Visiting the park

1

2

Comprehension Check

Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 18: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825

18 Chapter 1

Writing

Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences

Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple

compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will

learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and

editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences

The Simple Sentence

1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb

that work together to create a complete thought

Example e woman spoke

Subject Verb

2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object

so that the thought is complete

Examples e carnival has many highlights

Subject Verb Object

Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve

Subject Verb Object

and Haida Heritage Site

3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information

Examples No logging is allowed in the park

Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase

e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world

Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase

A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A

prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence

4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence

below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object

Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people

Subject Subject Verb Object

for more than 10 000 years

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 19: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences

Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences

1 At a traditional ceremony __________

2 During the annual film festival __________

3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________

4 On the prairie __________

5 We had a cool drink __________

6 Alongside the river __________

7 Enormous trees have survived __________

8 At the appropriate time __________

Exercise 2

Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI

beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing

1 In the most unique city in Canada __________

2 CBC held a contest __________

3 Many Canadians voted __________

4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________

5 Canadians chose many different places __________

6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________

7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________

8 Was a resident of the settlement __________

9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________

10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________

Exercise 3

Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to

make sure that they are complete

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 20: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025

20 Chapter 1

The Compound Sentence

A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been

joined by a coordinating conjunction

e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences

for nor or soand but yet

Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions

and additional information

Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island

but contrasting information

Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island

or alternative ideas

Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island

so cause and effect

Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast

Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent

clauses

e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences

About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

people are Haida

eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over

Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 21: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125

Chapter 1

Exercise 1

Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence

Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural

Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise

quickly

1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan

2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery

3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba

5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls

6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the

Cabot Trail

7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map

Exercise 2

Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this

chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence

to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 22: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225

22 Chapter 1

Writing to Communicate

Writing Task

Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words

1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could

be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place

2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor

place a community or an event in a particular place

Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it

is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never

been to the place that you are describing

Organization Choosing Information

As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need

to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about

the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are

unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first

paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs

1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec

Basic Information Location of the event

Length of the event

General activities at the event

Number of people who attend the event

Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name

Description of the Ice Palace

Activities

Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size

Materials used in the construction

Location

Other details

Ice Hotel

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 23: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325

Chapter 1

2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands

Basic Information Indigenous name

Information about people on the islands

Location

Number of islands

Types of wildlife

History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans

After contact with Europeans

Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park

Visiting the park

Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place

you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us

these lists as an outline for your composition

Descriptive Writing Creating an Image

When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e

organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important

to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place

seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place

In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and

the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One

of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive

feeling but also create a mood

In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns

high spirit

lively crowd welcoming environment

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 24: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425

24 Chapter 1

In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to

create a very different mood

distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands

incredibly rich diversity of biological life

masterful carvers

magnificent villages unique history

huge cedar spruce and hemlock

abandoned villages

What feelings or moods do these adjectives create

What kind of person might be attracted to this place

What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four

descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers

Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that

convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers

choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting

information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers

Revising and Editing

Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and

want to know Consider the following questions

bull Could your reader find the place on a map

bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader

bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place

Step 2Focus on your word choice

bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey

Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete

bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb

bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future

Page 25: Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525

Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o

your composition

bull What is the name of the place

bull Where is the place

bull What are three significant aspects of the place

bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition

bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this

place

Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback

Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter

Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and

use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing

strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text

you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning

forward and use it in new situations

Respond to the following questions

1 What did you learn

2 What do you think was important

3 How can you use what you learned in the future